JP2019216913A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a performance regarding hold display and active display.SOLUTION: Change suggestive performances (a character A, a character B) for suggesting a change in a display mode of active display 30TM003 (round display) include a success mode for changing a display mode of the active display 30TM003 (round display) and a failure mode for not changing a display mode of the active display 30TM003 (round display). The higher the ratio of the number of execution times of a change suggestive performance in a success mode to the number of execution times of a change suggestive performance is, the higher a degree of expectation toward a jackpot is.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As disclosed in Patent Literature 1, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time the pseudo consecutive change is executed.

JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of the means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the form of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means, as a change suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2), a ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in FIGS. The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of indicating the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Directing) that can be performed
During a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when the reach state is established), the decoration symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-fluctuation (pseudo ream) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily set. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period until the stop, the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]). Is higher, the bigger the jackpot expectation is, the more likely the display mode is. For example, the display mode when [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the successful mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is a blue mode. Next Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of the means N2 is
The gaming machine of the means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is different. Different),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of the hits, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the greater the number of times the success indication change suggestion effect is continuous even with the active display of the same display color, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means N3 is
A game machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 11 to 18, the temporary stop is not performed with respect to the change display of the decorative symbol when the change suggestion effect is being executed). The direction of movement does not change)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means N4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 11-18 (1), after execution of a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). And performing a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The game machine of the means N5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which a character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of the means N6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, character D). Change suggestion effect) appears.
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect. High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to K7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, variable display corresponding to the first information and variable display common to the first information are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 11C, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode than the active display 30TM003). The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than that of the first hold display 30TM001.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information, as information corresponding to common variable display, thereby improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. And interest in the aspect of the first information and the second information.

The game machine of means K2 is
The gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue circular display. , The sub-hold display 30TM004b in the blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
A game machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is in red mode, the bigger the jackpot expectation is)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a common mode as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105), and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub reserve display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color mode) having the same display color. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be displayed as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of means K5 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information in accordance with the execution of the notification effect. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active state are displayed. (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, information on the variable display is confirmed even during execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first suspension display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying the balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays a second information Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. When the display mode changes, the jackpot expectation is higher.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, variable display corresponding to the first information and variable display common to the first information are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the announcement effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When changed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, it is possible to suppress an effect from being complicated and to enhance interest. be able to.

The game machine of the means L2 is
The game machine of the means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue circular display. , The sub-hold display 30TM004b in the blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of the means L3 is
A game machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is in red mode, the bigger the jackpot expectation is)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of the means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a common mode as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105), and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub reserve display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color mode) having the same display color. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be displayed as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of the means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information in accordance with the execution of the notification effect. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active state are displayed. (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, information on the variable display is confirmed even during execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of the means L6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first suspension display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying the balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of the means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays a second information Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. When the display mode changes, the jackpot expectation is higher.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time the pseudo continuous change is executed. Have been. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means M1 to M6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means M1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the form of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means, as a change suggestion effect, displays a change suggestion effect of a success mode as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2) by hitting the ball thrown by the character on the active display 30TM003. An effect that changes the aspect) and an effect that suggests a change in the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20), an effect in which the ball thrown by the character is flipped by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed). ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, within a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state, the decoration symbol is started from the start of the change (re-change (pseudo-run) after the temporary stop). During the period until the temporary stop of the decorative pattern combination or pseudo-continuous symbol), and during the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns). The execution ratios are different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%) (If the suggestion effect is executed and one time is a success mode and one time is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means M2 is
The gaming machine according to the means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (the active display 30TM003), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of the hits, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the greater the number of times the success indication change suggestion effect is continuous even with the active display of the same display color, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means M3 is
A game machine of means M1 or means M2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 11 to 18, the temporary stop is not performed with respect to the change display of the decorative symbol when the change suggestion effect is being executed). The direction of movement does not change)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of the means M4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 11-18 (1), after execution of a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). And performing a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The gaming machine of the means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which a character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means M6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, character D). Change suggestion effect) appears.
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect. High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine which appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of the means A1
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while being controlled to the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame opening sensor to be in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

The gaming machine of the means A2 is
A game machine of means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means A3 is
A game machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
A game machine of means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the provision means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means (an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is open). A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is in the open state),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be limited.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a provision signal in response to input of a provision request signal from the gaming device (a BRQ signal is turned on) (turns an EXS signal on) and outputs the provision signal. When an application command signal output from the gaming device according to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is applied,
When controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting check mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is ON, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power cut-off). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The game machine of the means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is also ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting check mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) corresponding to the specific control (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

The game machine of the means C2 is
The game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is also ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of the means C6 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting check mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change switch 21TM052 is in the ON state) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the shift to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter, If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (control to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped when the setting change mode is being controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of the means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) when power supply to the gaming machine is started and initializes the operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Operation) is performed to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of the means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control micro-processor for executing a game control timer interrupt process), comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “Setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology. The invention according to the means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which allows an external device to grasp the status of a process related to a change in a set value. is there.

The game machine of the means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from a first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing the steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be changeable when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting corresponding change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds from the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting control mode has been set.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled to the setting check mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (simultaneously outputs a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing the steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be changeable when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output process when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
A game machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051);
When the setting change operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated. , And a warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the setting value. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information relating to a set value on an external device side.

The gaming machine of the means F1 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of the means F2,
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is turned on during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the control is in the setting check mode and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means F5 is
A game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after once turning off the setting change corresponding signal with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) is used. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting check mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of the means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
A game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from a common terminal (for example, outputting from a tenth terminal);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of the means F9,
A game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal.) ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of the means F11 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output when the processing related to the change of the set value is completed (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting check mode). After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention relating to the means G1 to G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of the means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a game value (pachinko ball),
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine is opened (for example, the game machine frame 3). Means (a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) And a payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether the setting change mode is controlled or not, when the open state is detected, the provision of the game value is restricted (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process is not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of the means G2 is
The gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is provided with the open state detecting means (game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. When (the state of the gaming machine frame 3 being opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (in the case of YES in step S21TM3520, the processing after step S21TM3530 is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the open state is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A game machine of means G1 or means G2,
A specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of a setting change flag) that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can set a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (game). When the setting changing flag is set after turning on the power, the control microcomputer 100 sets the gaming machine frame 3 to the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 to the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied under the condition that the condition is satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game processing and loops until the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped.

The game machine of means G4 is
A game machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting change flag) is deleted (YES is determined in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. The process is ended, and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is opened, the payout of the game medium is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to give the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A game machine of means G5,
The providing means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the dispensing motor 21TM289) includes:
The game value is assigned based on the information (number of payouts) related to the assignment of the game value received from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 executing the game control timer interrupt process),
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid-number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (number of unpaid numbers) relating to the game value to be given;
The storage means can store the additional information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the giving means executes the giving of the game value in accordance with the adding information stored in the storing means (the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium). If it occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the interrupted payout is resumed after the power is turned on, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information regarding the game value to be granted, and to store the information after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to assign a game value corresponding to the assignment information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which controls the payout motor 21TM289) executes the giving of the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) outputted from the gaming machine,
When the open state is detected, the provision of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided for the gaming machine). When detecting opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout of the game medium is executed. Is not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the provision of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the giving operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, Maintenance work or the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open can be smoothly advanced.

The game machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
Along with the control in the setting confirmation mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized. If the determination is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050, or if the determination is YES in step S21TM3140, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3150. Is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, thereby not proceeding to step S21TM3050, or Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.

The game machine of means G9 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
The additional information is initialized when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). At the same time, the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the grant information on the gaming value to be granted, so that management at the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of the means G10 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
Regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized, the additional information is not initialized. Also, since the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is not initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the assignment information is not initialized, so that information on the game value to be assigned can be appropriately protected.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the external device side determines the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of a process related to a change in a set value on the external device side. In some cases, it is necessary to distinguish and recognize them. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, the external device side needs to recognize both. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention according to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above situation, and the external device side distinguishes the occurrence state of a predetermined event in a gaming machine and the execution state of a process related to a change of a set value on an external device side. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The game machine of the means H1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change) Mode) to output a specific signal.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode because the RAM is cleared. Is output for 30 seconds, and when the RAM is cleared and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means H2 is
A game machine of means H1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means H3 is
A game machine of means H1 or means H2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5), and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a clerk at a game hall or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of the means H5 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value of a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution state of a process related to a set value on an external device side. .

The gaming machine of the means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stops the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the setting value is longer than a predetermined period. , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means I2 is
The gaming machine of the means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) generated in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (for the security signal, RAM clear is executed. If the setting change mode is not controlled, the signal is output for 30 seconds. If the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means I3 is
A game machine of means I1 or means I2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5), and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a clerk at a game hall or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of the means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of the means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title for notifying the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see JP-A-2006-101428). In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The invention relating to means J1 to means J8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1 is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of the means J2 is the game machine of the means J1,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8C).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

The game machine of means J3 is a game machine of means J1 or means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

The game machine of means J4 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J3,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The game machine of the means J5 is a game machine of the means J4,
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J6 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J5,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J7 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J6,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) having a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 8-10 (E) and 8-11 (I)). )),
During the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to J7,
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (a first-size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12A). And the like, and a second suggestion display having a display size of the second size (a reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120),
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). ) Can be displayed (e.g., the fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated along with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. . It is a timing chart which shows the method of restricting ball lending based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting ball lending after completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball lending without shifting to the setting change mode after power is turned off. It is a timing chart which shows the method which changes to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly ends ball lending. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and restarting ball lending. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting award ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restarting the prize ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating award ball payout. It is a timing chart which shows the method which changes to a setting change mode after power-off and restarts award ball payout. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold | maintenance display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows a change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower right and left sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning port is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called an ordinary game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose display indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (storage). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) for paying out prize balls when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol will be "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening becomes open).

  When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (the start winning prize has occurred. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” and the big hit symbol If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is displayed.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing of the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc. to be described later) are prepared. Type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. As in the case of the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for “small hit”.

  After the big hitting game state is ended, the state may be controlled to a time saving state or a probable change state according to the above big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time for fluctuating the figure (the period for fluctuating the figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "hitting the figure" in the figure drawing game is improved compared to the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and is a state advantageous to the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a “big hit” is likely to occur.

  The time-saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. Execution of a predetermined number of special figure games as an end condition is also referred to as count cut (time cut, time cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which control is performed in the same manner as when the processing is not performed.

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is also referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy and low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes “small hit” (however, “small hit” occurs. If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that a game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the state may be controlled to be a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and raising the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5, as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the two special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to be a "big hit" (also referred to as a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state becomes In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probable variable symbol, a promotion effect that eventually becomes “probable variable jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decoration symbol (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right." In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it is “small hit” Alternatively, a common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). When the display result is “losing”, after the decorative pattern variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the big hit combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. The fixed decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-described variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit middle effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal).

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or fail) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the vehicle has entered and the switch has been turned on, etc.), and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, directs an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a fluctuation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of restoration of power interruption).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 includes various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signals, and outputs sounds designated by the sound designation signals from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, the control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal and a lamp signal, etc.), and the control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the initialization process (Step S8) is executed because the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins and the like, and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-day drawing”. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). In some cases, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a production control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning prize determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning prize, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined by using a random value for determining a variation pattern based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect) and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process of setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is being controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the large winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to make settings for ending the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. Processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control is included. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (Step S73; No), the process of Step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, a production control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control process processing or the like can confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command. It turns on the provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, the effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3”, and the rendering process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, when the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is "losing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating “-” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, but may be a computer device or the like in advance. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the expression of comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) means that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may also include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach-loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display result is "big hit", such as reach-loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by a larger number of effect devices in the reach with the higher reliability than in the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the staging effect is improved. The title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed on the entire screen, and a sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is executed, the subsequent portion of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, a victory occurs when an ally character wins, and a loss occurs when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super-reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the character of “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is executed, the succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory portion until the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production has started, and which title is to be notified. The superreach A and the superreach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine at least one superreach by watching the production. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the mode of notification of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the degree of expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, the effect can be prevented from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  The indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. May be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Note that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of presentation regardless of the timing.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
At the timing of deriving the display result (the end of the variable display) after the execution of each reach effect, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determined effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously informed during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, in the case of displaying the characters resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in a high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is executed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As illustrated in FIG. 8D, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating that the device has failed) may be displayed. It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion effect)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured such that black stars indicating the expectation degree are displayed from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the degree of expectation indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed in a stepwise manner each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the expectation indication display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, as shown in FIG. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree) (Including a suggested effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to or in place of the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title or the expected degree suggestion display changes may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect), such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”, for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern” as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A). The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of the change of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is changed from "white", "red", "white" to "red", and is displayed in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate in the special mode from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach other than a low-reliability super reach), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of the line announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the title announcement and the speech announcement changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of acting on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) it changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of the character motion or the battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information (notice of mainly displaying characters) relating to other effects. May be. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are respectively different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission (“Let's reach at 7”, “Use a stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to the notification of the title of a mission.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character which is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I).

  Along with the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Then, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the player's sense of expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and FIG. 8-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) and also notifies the game effect lamp 9 of light emission. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  After that, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character “BATTLE WIN!” Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 8F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from being difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and game effect lamps 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Of the predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade provides predetermined power to the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037 and the like. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, among the store clerks of the amusement shop, only the store clerk having the key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging gaming balls winning each winning opening and gaming balls entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2, and the front face of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball out state, or the detection signal from the full switch 21TM048 indicates the full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signals and received ACK signals) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, one second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the reception to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. And specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. When a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up, or running out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal. The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 by serial communication will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9B.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9C.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9B.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, award ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC to the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) changes according to a set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value for the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also subject to variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9C, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 9E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the cases of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probability” shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the display of the counting of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the large winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize (attacker) are input, and the number of fired balls is totaled. The display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of prize balls by the prize into the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. Percentage (%), which is the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to a prize in a large winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls in the winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of winning balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) includes the number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu), and the large winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game balls varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game balls varies. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditors, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning of the game, the connection ratio and the winning ratio are determined by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (den Chu balls), and winning in the big winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize prize balls (the number of prize balls), and the special telephone The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 awarded balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, and the number of prize balls due to winning a large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the prize balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces are reflected on the winning combination (%) for 60000 pieces displayed after that, the prize balls for 6000 pieces are displayed. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of award balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning a large winning opening (attacker), the award ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and summing the total number at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

  In the present embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning prize ball, a normal electric winning prize ball, and a special electric winning. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) are described below. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (combination ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquisition balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous role-acquiring balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker. The total hits refers to the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquired balls + number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] x 100 ... (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of the game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of accessory acquired balls is 19876, the ratio of the winning combination (%) is calculated by dividing 34,821 by 19,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to obtain 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, an error of + 0.3% is obtained at 32799/327 = 100.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the microcomputer for game control is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, the error gradually increases even when the value is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the position ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins in the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the sensors provided on each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won, and the number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after a discharge path from which a game medium that has won the attacker and a game medium that has won the electric chute are discharged is joined, and the detection result is used. On the basis of this, the number of the acquired accessory balls and the number of the consecutive accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9C). On the back side of the gaming board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is counted by the special winning number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A first grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the mouth and a second grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the second grand prize are separately provided, and the number of prizes to the first grand prize is determined. And the number of winnings in the second big winning opening may be separately totalized, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 9C. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio of the ratios in 21TM052. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings. In the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swage board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. The seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position which is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the totaled set values (1 to 6) and a RAM clear notification (“C”) indicating that the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode has been completed. ) Is displayed, the totaling period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit, and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Also, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on 60000 previous prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning to the large winning opening during the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 21TM029B is displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, the main board 11 enters the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning opening switches to the fourth general winning opening switch and the outlet switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number are output. The values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added, whereby each entry area is added. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. (Included in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the totaled number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize port divided here is a prize ball for a prize ball in a general prize port prize ball (first general prize port to fourth general prize port (sode)). ), 1st starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball in the 1st starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize prize ball (winning prize ball in electric chu), special electric prize winning ball (to attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first start are calculated. The number of game ball winnings in the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls in each winning port for each of the 6,000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a 0-th storage area composed of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning ports, the total number of winning balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has a duty ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and a total cumulative hand ratio and a connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the prize balls based on the winning numbers of the game balls to the respective winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And the total winning combination and the connection ratio are stored in the connection winning combination storage area. Each of the connection ratio combination storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored, for example, as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings of 10 sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the 10 sets of winning balls is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are to be stored, for example, as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads out data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  As shown in FIG. 9-8, a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of the RAM 102 (a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of In a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, and the reference data referred to by the control program is stored in the storage area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total hand combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having first to tenth storage areas, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-described data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, etc.) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9A is a time chart illustrating display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term connection ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative winning combination of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include:
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the display when the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1 and the base 2. When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short term ratio, the short term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total total combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total total position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “6”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  Although the display monitor 21TM029 according to the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. May be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls awarded may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. .

  In this embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term ratio and the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative position ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the winning combination, the total cumulative connecting ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio.

  When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage area of the sum and total accumulation for 10 sets and the storage of the combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and the combination of 10 sets and total are respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively “27”, “81” and “81”. 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (eg, initializes a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102 in the RAM 102. The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the operation for turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is executed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and as a result, the set value stored in the RAM 102 The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the read set value (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the processing shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes power-off detection processing (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been performed, and the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  If the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power-off detection processing. If the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (process in steps S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port This is an area in which the state is stored (output port buffer), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area where the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like are restored from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to report that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed as follows: (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, immediately after step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the initialization processing of the step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in either the step S21TM1320 or the step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear processing initializes predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by performing the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, it is possible to selectively perform processing according to a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is provided on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). A transition to the setting confirmation mode may be made possible.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update processing and the initial value random number update processing are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update processing and the initial value random number update processing are completed, the interrupt permission state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a symbol. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for normal symbol determination is one cycle (in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, the process of controlling the gaming machine). When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140), and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220) and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on receiving the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The magnetism of the level determined is detected, the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band of the level determined to be abnormal by the radio sensor (not shown) are detected. Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball has won any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for performing settings and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the winning information such as the winning ratio such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base (step S21TM1640), and displays the winning information such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number such as the random number value MR1 or the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, in the output port included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in accordance with the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting an effect control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set in an output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning off after that, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is set after setting the interrupt enable state.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is provided. By transmitting the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an existing command such as the above, the set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9B, on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a store clerk or the like at the game arcade switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this manner, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by the store clerk of the game arcade or the like. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display such as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (the set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9D, the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by a store clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ), And the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify a store clerk or the like of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (from step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicating the game state at the time of occurrence of a power failure is cleared, and an initial value is set. Thereby, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a store clerk of the game arcade or the like that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the store clerk of the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 and subsequent steps, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, an example in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value most advantageous to the player ("6" in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous value to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the RAM clear notification. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while the lock switch 21TM051 is being set to the setting change mode, the lock value of the RAM 102 is not set. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by an operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9B, on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off. When the power is turned on (in the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set values "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area) on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). The set value “1” is displayed (Step S) 1TM1230).

  Unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the set value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example). In such a case, if the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a big hit type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode, that is, 21TM052 is in the OFF state, is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the store clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the store clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization process. Whether or not to execute can be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform an initialization process to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (the RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if a clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is temporarily turned off, and when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is changed to the setting check mode. There is no initialization and no disadvantage to the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be confirmed without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102), such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  FIG. 9-17 shows a setting change mode and a setting change mode by the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 9-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-17 (2) is an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. An example of an image displayed on the device 5 is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the character "Setting is being changed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change is performed. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, the video signal is not supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 at step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or at step S21TM1460, CPU 103). The CPU 120 for effect control specifies that the microcomputer 100 for game control has ended the setting change mode, based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be reported. For example, on the image display device 5, a character "Setting change completed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound "Setting is being changed") for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is set to It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a state where the game can be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character “Setting is being confirmed”, and outputs a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being confirmed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbols, small symbols, fourth symbols, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, based on the reception of the power-off restoration command or the power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, a character "Setting confirmation completed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being confirmed") for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 9-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. Fig. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) indicating that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image of a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. 9-18 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. 9- (2). In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in FIG. 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

  When the set value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests a setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to perform the effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high rate (for example, 50%), and It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

  Next, the award ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that a prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set in an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, if an award ball error (an abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to “1”. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being checked, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a winning. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is set by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when game balls are detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, a prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning port 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. The award ball number command “0101110” for notifying the 14 balls is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the fulfillment of the prize ball payout condition (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the award ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits in accordance with the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any one of the commands is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state where the prize ball operation is being executed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 9-21 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal illustrated in FIG. 9-19 and the control command illustrated in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 9-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 has been cut. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the point of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting processing of the internal device register of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, the payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least the process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to the winning ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to the ball lending request) May be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set in a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value to the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same processing as the serial communication circuit setting processing (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing in accordance with the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and the states of bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 and for controlling to pay out a number of prize balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, or a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM 374 based on the error bit being set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIGS. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Further, similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM371 interrupts the interrupt requested by the serial communication circuit 21TM380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 is a diagram illustrating the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the ball rental executed between the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is used. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, these first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and outputs the signal from the card unit 21TM050. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loaned balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first to fourth ball lending restriction methods described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period of control in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, thereby controlling the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It can be prevented from running. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection control command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while not receiving the connection confirmation command), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected. It is not in the state but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal which is in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. In this manner, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 9-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a clerk of a game arcade or the like closes the game machine frame 3 in order to bring the pachinko game machine 1 into a playable state. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 9 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the connection confirmation signal being ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, but the connection control command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (ie, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While processing in change mode or setting confirmation mode (while connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (occurrence of ball lending error) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, The EXS signal to the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed without the ball lending switch 21TM062 being operated again (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be executed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How not to execute the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is ON and that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer 100 and the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  As described above, even during the period in which the setting control mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, thereby improving workability. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Note that when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped in the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the end of setting change mode)
Next, FIG. 9-32 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed, and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on thereafter. This will be described specifically. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power-off during the execution of the payout of the game medium, and the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. More specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting check mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is ended (the connection check signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Perform a payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored thereafter, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, an example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred or a power-off that has occurred due to turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting check mode.After the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Method of forced termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball rental is being performed and the payout is not resumed after the power is restored will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the number of unpaid items is not backed up, a predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process which was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting is changed. By not executing the payout of the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power supply is cut off during the payout, the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, so that the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped). Not limited to such a mode, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change is not performed. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This makes it possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during execution of communication processing for connection confirmation (from transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to reception of a connection OK command as a received ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls to the winning ball request signal, and sends the set winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the connection control unit 21 transmits the connection OK command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth starting port switch. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which a switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state of each switch of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, while the game medium is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, the tabulation of each item such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is not required. , And the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first to fourth general winning port switches to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of payout balls. Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch process is executed during the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), However, there is a case where a big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after determination). In other words, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the playground may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of payout balls based on the passing of the game balls through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not executed. I have to. Unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises in that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared, and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the game control timer interrupt process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been disabled. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol processing (step S21TM) in the same interrupt processing are performed. S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Accordingly, the game control microcomputer 100 sends the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the award ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  Note that, during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 9-35 can be applied, and based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol process processing should not be executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the payout control is performed. The payout is invalidated without causing the microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of opening of gaming machine frame and door frame)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the upper plate on which the flowing prize balls are stored. If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100 Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  In this manner, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. The game machine is driven to execute a payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) according to a prize during a period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It drives and executes the payout control of the game media corresponding to the number of unpaid. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be set to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 9-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, Normally, the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of the prize balls during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled and the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled are restricted.

  Next, control in the case where a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show patterns related to power-down in different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of power-down. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 9-37 (1) indicates control in the case where power-off occurs in a state where “set value change” is not performed during “setting value change”, and power-off recovery is performed. The set value at the time becomes the set value at the time of the previous power-on. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control when the power-off occurs in the state where “set value decision” is performed during “the setting value is being changed”. The set value at the time of power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows a setting in the case where the power is cut off without the operation of “set value confirmation” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value confirmation” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom along the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Status” columns). ). In FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of “set value”, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of “set value display” in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the “Status” column in FIG. 9-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1), and As shown in the “Lock Switch” column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 9-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , “1”.

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at this stage because the power has just been turned on. Since the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode start” status (order 2) is reached. Then, in this “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that it has not been changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102, as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the setting value is being changed (order 3), the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to “2”.

  Furthermore, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 4) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is turned off during “setting value change” (order 5), the operation for finalizing the setting value is not performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of “set value” remains “1”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is turned on while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (order 6), then In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the set value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the restoration of the power is: The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply is cut off before the set value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, it is assumed that the “set value change” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of “3”. Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the setting value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power is turned off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed. The column of “set value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from the value when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the state of the “setting change mode start” thereafter ( In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, if the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, a clerk of a game arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. The handling of the set value in such an unstable state becomes a problem. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. In the event of a power failure, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, appropriate control relating to the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which a game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing a set value has been performed.

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during a game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of a special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), and transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 has been operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command to the effect control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “lock switch operation detected.” Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is executed.

  In this example, based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as the abnormal operation warning notification. Is displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk at the game hall, etc., confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed). Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed during a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is being executed or the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being executed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is about to be illegally changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during a period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5 which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. In addition, as described above, ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and award ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, it is possible to operate the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When the operation is performed, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value are performed is notified to enhance the deterrence of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 9 to 39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time ten prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame 3 opening state is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for the number of times of determining all symbols is output. The all symbol determination count signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. This is a pulse signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is winning to the second starting winning port. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal of the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is also turned on when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time, as described later. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). This is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where a fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included. An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power, a setting corresponding change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, if the RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on and the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the above, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the RAM is cleared without switching to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is changed in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. It remains ON for 30 seconds after the end of (if the result of the check is not normal). On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the device may be temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control is performed by the gaming machine on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, even if the external device is configured based on at least the input of the security signal, Thus, the possibility of executing the RAM clear and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 9C, the security signal may not be output during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. This configuration includes a configuration in which the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Does not output the security signal, and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but no security signal is output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5), the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, the security signal may not be output during the period when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at power-on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state, while the security signal is set to the OFF state. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. , And clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal due to the restriction on the assignment of the setting change corresponding signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as in the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where a fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included. An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time, as described later. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and after that, from the same tenth terminal, a pulse-like number corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the set value determined in advance in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the gaming arcade through the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the settings changed in the setting change work. The inconsistency with the value can be grasped by the administrator. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or setting change work again for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, the signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change corresponding signal is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, but based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode is set. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after the change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are completed, but also at a predetermined predetermined timing, a pulse corresponding to the set value is output as a setting change corresponding signal of the special mode. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of awarded balls by 1000. In addition, when an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to the occurrence of a big hit.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change corresponding signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of fraudulent change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), three pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal when a big hit occurs.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output process is performed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Thus, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the control is in the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed following the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes the OFF state, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Is output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment related to the game control main process of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 9-44, after the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43 and clears the input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is checked (step S21TM2110).

  If the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1230 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, if it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Are not controlled in the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power, a series of processes related to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 is performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processing shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) To transmit a setting command (step S21TM2550). When the CPU 103 is controlled to be in the setting check mode, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270), and then transmits a setting check mode command (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (a setting change mode end command or a setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command is received. Since the effect of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified on the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of commands can be reduced. That is, the control load on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications of Feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is described. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect an operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the check of the set value and the switching operation according to the check of the set value are facilitated, and the workability can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a seven-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but no switch for changing the set value is provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in sequence when the game is controlled to the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds) and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A), so that the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, For example, being controlled to the setting change mode, being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, being within the period of being controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period of being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, setting value Information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being within the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol The symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, a display (number of rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Or, when the security signal is turned ON when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting check mode is ended, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is ended. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. With such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify a period in which control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expected degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expected degree. May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (In the case of 1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree effect is executed. In addition, even when the reach of the jackpot is low, the expectation effect with a large number of black stars (for example, three or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and If the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Modes of Feature 21TM]
Next, details and other forms of the above-described feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame includes a hinge mechanism (not shown) at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each support the hinge mechanism. The other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side as viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, on the right side when viewed from the player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is a frame serving as an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of a synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape whose center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by the fixing device so as not to come off the game machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are provided. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window through which a game area on the front of the game board 2 can be visually recognized while protecting the game board surface.

  When a store clerk of the game hall performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogging of a ball), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum. In order for a store clerk at the game arcade to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like, which are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted to the front side like a door, as a fulcrum. The other end needs to be in an open state separated from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 specifies a detection signal capable of specifying that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is open is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
10-1 and FIG. 10-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, and This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This processing is similar to the processing shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to a setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine maker (before being installed in a game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned regular value is stored in the set value storage area. May be. When the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the data may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and initialized. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be performed.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoring power supply (step S21TM3045). The process moves to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like are restored from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to report that.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to the processing in step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not interrupted during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). The setting value is changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070). Confirmation becomes possible, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). .

  In this embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state in which the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions of (1) and (2), further (3) on condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 or there is some illegal There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to confirm or change the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. The control is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the routine shifts to a normal game process. With the shift to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 can be executed. The indicated game control timer interrupt processing can be executed (special symbol process processing and the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if regular values (1 to 6) are stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, and The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Also, in step S21TM3030, if the regular values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a setting value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal values (1 to 6), , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “Setting value is abnormal” is displayed). Do). Further, effect control CPU 120 notifies image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message “Please change setting value” is displayed). The speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a sound “the set value is abnormal.”), And change the set value. It may be informed that the state is to be changed (for example, a sound such as “Please change the set value” is output).

  When transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored is not cleared. The tally value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and processes from step S21TM3510 onward relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands transmitted only once at the time of power-on. Therefore, when transmitting these power-on commands, the CPU 103 can specify that the power-on command has been transmitted and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the command transmission flag may be cleared when shifting to the normal game process (from step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, a backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is turned off during the setting change (that is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, If the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to the normal game process, the set value in the set value storage area needs to be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

  In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the CPU 103 can change the setting value ( (Change setting mode).

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, the game cannot be shifted to the normal game processing. For this reason, when it is determined as NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once, and (1) to (3) at the time of the next power-on. Is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the character “Please turn off the power.”) Prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of FIG. 10B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area for storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 outputs a setting change correspondence signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set values stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode to specify that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the flow shifts to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 performs the setting for designating control to the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Accordingly, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. If the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (YES in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And a state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM3600) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is determined). Is kept 0).

  In addition, it is possible to execute output of a security signal (step S21TM3540) and display of the current setting value (step S3550), and transmission of a setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and update of the setting value (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). (The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. For this reason, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting change in-flight flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change-in-progress flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, and it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command specifying the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and that power is cut off during setting change. Is not present (NO in step S21TM3020), and the setting value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). NO), that is, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed, so that the normal process at the time of power restoration may be executed, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM has been cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (before YES is determined in step S21TM3530), if the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode, the set value remains 0). When the operation of changing the set value is not performed (for example, when the operation of changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again, and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, the store clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). By turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM3040 or S21TM3140 is NO and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10B, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all of the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for being opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a command for notifying that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or the setting confirmation. A command instructing that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands notifies the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. The user is informed that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended by operating. For example, a message such as "Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode" may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 Is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch ( When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “lock switch operation detected.” Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the game hall clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting check mode, and It can be confirmed whether or not the operation is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is performed, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram showing changes in set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. Indicates the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs a setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is set to 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as corresponding information. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, if the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the administrator of the game arcade May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from a regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In order to prevent such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the set value storage area, Regardless of how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value. This is performed, and a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is not stored in the set value storage area, and information (a character E in this example) different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, the process proceeds to step S21TM3550. Thus, the normal set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value, and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), a value (0 in this example) different from a regular value is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on thereafter, if the set value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting change flag is set in advance, and thereafter, the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction of ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the game machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 shows the main board 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn the PRDY signal ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on, but turns it off.

  As a result, while the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, And the EXS signal are both OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state. Not to be. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a so that the clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless it is in the open state, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and determination processing for the control state are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the ball lending process and the prize ball process in the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled are restricted. You. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  As described above, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By restricting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid occurrence of troubles associated with the payout control, such as an inability to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and to provide the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Maintenance work and the like when the game machine is opened can smoothly proceed.

(Resumption of ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball rental is being performed, and thereafter, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Is specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (being closed).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. More specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 operates based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Thus, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has been completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 changes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (PRDY signal is turned on). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Thereby, the payout of the game medium which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurred (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), The payout is executed for the unpaid number that has not been paid, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process at power failure occurrence (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, is specifically described with reference to FIG. Will be explained. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power interruption during the execution of the payout of the game medium, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. In other words, the interrupted payout is resumed after the connection confirmation signal is turned on.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period when the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the gaming machine frame and the door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is calculated. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the ball lending and the payout of the game media is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clearing switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control microcontroller. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, when the store clerk operates the one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the RAM clearing which initializes the RAM 102 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 and the RAM 21TM302 of the payout controlling microcomputer 21TM370 are initialized. And clearing the RAM are executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 10-7 (2) This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number has not been cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter) when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Has been completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In the present example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of turning on the power), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the interrupted payout of game media and completing ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a have been closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payout amount). Even when the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed even if the PRDY signal is turned on.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in the previous) (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the unpaid number data stored in the RAM21TM302 to be executed. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout of the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Further, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 have separate and independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  If the store clerk of the game hall initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the power supply is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. Conversely, when the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on to clear the game. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 10-8 (2) This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number has not been cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter) when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the gaming machine frame and the door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. (There are remaining game media to be paid out), and based on the fact that the PRDY signal has been turned on, based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the interrupted payout of game media and completing ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a have been closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated at the time of turning on the power), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), and the PRDY signal is turned on. Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 has been executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Restriction on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting the payout of prize balls when the game machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 shows a game control microcomputer 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between computer 100 and microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the upper plate on which the flowing prize balls are stored. If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. Microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of game media related to any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. Is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 on the basis of the payout ball request signal, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is provided with each winning port. And the payout is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the payout control of the prize ball. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a so that the clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. With both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a being in the closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning during the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Restart of payout of prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted by the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-10, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (being closed).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the award ball number command, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. More specifically, the unpaid number is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), from a paid out number counting switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). Upon detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the information in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the payout of the game medium which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Prizeball processing when power failure occurs (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 11, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power interruption while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the power-on process (after the power is turned on, without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial connection shown in FIG. In the communication circuit setting process (a period until the execution of the step S21TM1480), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. Until the execution of S21TM1480), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout operation is performed by driving the payout motor 21TM289 on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State, and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the gaming machine frame and the door frame. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300, the content of the unpaid-number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the payout of the interrupted game media can be resumed, the payout of the prize ball can be completed.

(Award ball processing when power failure occurs (transition to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-12, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described specifically. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 10-12, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and when the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is performing a predetermined process as a power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10A (step S21TM1480) ) Is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout operation is performed by driving the payout motor 21TM289 on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and thereafter, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State.

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Is completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven. Let it.

  In the present example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of turning on the power), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number has not been cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are stored in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in the previous step (i.e., the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout of the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modification example regarding prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, FIG. 10-13 shows the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described specifically. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operating, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without paying out again.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the gaming machine frame 3 into an open state, and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When it becomes possible to detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is performing a predetermined process as a power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10A (step S21TM1480) ) Is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout operation is performed by driving the payout motor 21TM289 on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is determined. And the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter) when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk of the amusement arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the gaming machine frame and the door frame. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is determined. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number has not been cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated at the time of turning on the power), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restores the backup in the RAM 21TM302. Since the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (ie, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the reception of the winning ball number command being stopped, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and setting change corresponding signal)
As described above, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, the security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an illegal act, the detection of a game stop target error, and the like have been performed. In addition, the security signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the game proceeds to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. It is in the ON state during the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070, which is determined as NO and the normal game process is executed, as shown in 10-2.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal from the start of the processing for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. It is in the ON state during the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070, which is determined as NO and the normal game process is executed, as shown in 10-2. With the setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (when the process shifts to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then the RAM 102 is reset from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode involving clearing the RAM (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) at power-on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is started. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (accurately, at a timing of 50 ms after the end of the setting change mode and the transition to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM was cleared when the power was turned on (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1), but the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (Accurately, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process), the state is turned off. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3). In this case, the OFF state is not set immediately after the setting change mode ends, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). (At the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game process).

  10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (exactly, the setting change mode). After the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game is turned off at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the transition to the normal game processing), and thereafter (for example, after the elapse of 50 ms or more), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is output when the power is turned on (RAM It is ON for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal is longer than 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). That is, it is possible to recognize that only the confirmation may have been performed without being in a state where the setting value can be changed.

  That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the fact that the RAM may have been cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the mode may not have shifted to the setting change mode, may be determined by a hole computer or the like. In the case where the security device can be recognized and the input period of the security signal is shorter than 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (the possibility that only the confirmation was performed without being in a state where the setting value can be changed) and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, , It may have shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting has been changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is always executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on (step S21TM3050). Or, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is approximately +30 seconds during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between the case where the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode and the case where the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, each of the gaming machines can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the control has been performed in the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change mode). Alternatively, the state is set to the OFF state (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting check mode ended and the normal game processing was started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. When the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear.

  As described above, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device to which these signals are input has a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Has occurred, and that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it is possible to specify which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). When the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode shifts to the setting check mode (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), the setting check mode ends. Then, it is assumed that the process has shifted to the normal game process.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even if less than 50 ms has elapsed since the setting check mode was started, and the setting check mode was ended (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) and the process shifted to the normal game process, at least 50 ms or more The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is shorter than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It is difficult to recognize that the mode has been shifted. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the time period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on and then switched to the off state within less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses having a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) Cannot be recognized, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneously set. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, by setting the setting change corresponding signal to the ON state for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

  FIG. 10-16 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect device provided in the effect control board 12. In the present example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, a first off-screen display 21TM101, a second off-screen display 21TM102, and a fourth symbol display are provided on the lamp control board 14 in addition to the gaming effect lamp 9. A 21TM103 and a setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected, each of which is constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. All of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light-emitting devices emit light in a common emission color.

  The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the first reserved storage numbers, that is, when a winning in the first start winning opening occurs (when the first reserved storage number increases) and the first special symbol. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of first reserved storages decreases), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the first reserved storage number after the update from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen first reservation indicator 21TM101 emits light in a mode corresponding to the first reservation storage number designated by the first reservation storage number designation command.

  For example, when the first reserved storage number specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. Further, when the first number of reserved storages designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. If the first number of reserved storages designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 includes two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the second reserved storage numbers, that is, when a winning in the second start winning opening occurs (when the second reserved storage number increases), and when the second special symbol is changed. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of second reserved storages is reduced), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the second reserved storage number after the update from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second reservation indicator 21TM102 emits light in a mode corresponding to the second reservation storage number designated by the second reservation storage number designation command.

  For example, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. Then, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 includes two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11, and blinks at the timing when the first special symbol variable display is started (ie, (Variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variation display ends), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main substrate 11, and blinks at the timing when the second special symbol variable display is started (that is, the variable symbol). Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variable display is completed), and the display result is derived.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of the set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100; In addition, the change time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, receive the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and perform the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices on the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (ie, variable display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (that is, the display result is decided). ). For example, when the display result of the "outside" is designated by the display result designation command, one of the light emitting devices is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of "big hit" is designated by the display result designation command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command for designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the second special symbol is executed based on the reception of the set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100; In addition, the change time of the second special symbol can be specified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, based on receiving the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the second special symbol It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device on the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (ie, variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, when the display result of “outside” is specified by the display result specifying command, the other light emitting device is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of “big hit” is specified by the display result specifying command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be made different. For example, the former emits blue light and the latter emits red light. You may make it do. Also, in the fourth symbol display 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is made different from the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former may be emitted in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen display 21TM101), and the latter may be emitted in red (the same emission color as the second on-hold display 21TM102). You may do it.

  Further, an image indicating the first number of reserved storages (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image indicating the second number of reserved storages (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) are displayed as images. The information may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, in the case where the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a square image, blinks (fluctuates) in white while the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed, and the display result is out of order. Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol determination period, and is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square) Is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period when the second special symbol is variably displayed, and when the display result is out of order, the display is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image which is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change state indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is turned on and off. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change state display 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and that it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (blinking state) by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. Has become. Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on to when the display control unit 123 can perform image display control on the image display device 5, the light emission of each light emitting device is performed by the lamp control board 14 after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is very short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and that the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode. Even before the display control is enabled), it is possible to notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. It becomes possible.

  In the effect control board 12, the game is not limited to the setting change state display 21TM104, and the first off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the second off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the setting is performed, it may be notified that the control is being performed in the setting change mode or that the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode. For example, the fact that all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second off-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are turned on is controlled to the setting change mode. It is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by making all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen, the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blink. May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-use hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display device 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (for example, all are simultaneously turned on). ), It is possible to notify that control is being performed in the setting change mode. Also, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-use hold display 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, The special symbol display device 4B and the ordinary symbol indicator 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (and a light emission pattern different even when being controlled in the setting change mode). (For example, by making all of them blink at the same time), it can be notified that the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 30TM will be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved display area 30TM101 for displaying the first reserved storage number (0 to 4 first reserved display 30TM001), and a second reserved storage number (0 to 4 second reserved display 30TM001). A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is located on the left side when viewed from the player with the active display area 30TM103 at the center. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved storage number is not 0, effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 30TM001 corresponding to the first reserved storage number in first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed, and the first hold display 30TM001 is controlled to the big hit game state. And the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold displays 30TM001 correspond to the first hold display 30TM001 in an order close to the active display area 30TM103 (from the right as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of second reserved displays 30TM002 corresponding to the second reserved storage number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, winning in the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the game is controlled to the big hit game state. This is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved storage number is not zero). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold displays 30TM002 correspond to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the left as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that after the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game This is information corresponding to the special symbol variable display (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved storages is not zero.

  Further, the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (the left side as viewed from the player) is an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and the first hold storage number (0 to 4 secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and the active display area 30TM103 are different from each other, and a sub-active display area 30TM105 for displaying the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is to be displayed at the time of the start winning (when a winning in the first start winning opening occurs), and displays the sub-hold display area 30TM104 in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. A number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to one hold storage number are displayed, and a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game state is controlled). And the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). In addition, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled after the start condition (for example, the winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied and the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed) and the big hit game state is performed. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the fluctuations corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 are arranged in an order close to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right as viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-reserve display 30TM004 is a star-shaped outline, which is different from the first reservation display 30TM001 (round or triangular display). The sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller in size than the first hold display 30TM001 and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player. The sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (circular display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller in size than the active display 30TM003, and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the secondary active The sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this manner, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) that is being executed, information in different modes, that is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  In addition, in response to the first number of storages being four, four first holding displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101, and four sub-holding displays are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed, information in different modes, that is, the first hold display 30TM001 and the secondary hold display 30TM004 are displayed. That is, one first hold display 30TM001, a variable display (hold storage) corresponding to the first first hold display 30TM001, and one sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the common variable display (hold storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this manner, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to a common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, The effects using the hold display can be diversified to enhance the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the active variable display (variable display of the first special symbol and variable design) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effects using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as described later, when it is determined that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the determination at the time of the start winning, while the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. Also, while the active display area 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display area 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and indicates that the sub-active display area 30TM005 is to be displayed. Information (a rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11A) is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect refers to a first hold display 30TM001 or an active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning, and a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example). (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) This is an announcement effect that is displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, a white star display) in which the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning is displayed. The announcement effect is displayed in a blue mode (blue star display in this example) or a red mode (red star display in this example).

  FIG. 11B is a flowchart illustrating the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process illustrated in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 firstly executes a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not one (1) reserved storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is to be made, and the result of determining the type of the big hit, among the winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big hit is to be made and a big hit type in the case of a big hit based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and specifies a result of the determination. Output the specified command. The fluctuation category command is an effect control command indicating a fluctuation pattern determination result among the prize-winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not to reach normal reach or super reach based on the random number for variation pattern type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command specifying the determination result. I do. The first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designating command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designating command) are newly stored in the start winning command storage area. I do. If one set of start winning command has not been newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If one set of start winning commands has been newly received, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the change prohibition flag has been set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on at least a determination that the first change effect is to be executed. If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11C) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing after step S30TM1030 is executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured to be able to execute the second change effect.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” ”And“ golden aspects ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode” Can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. “No display” indicates that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "losing" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "losing"), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) becomes the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 31%, and the special mode (white circle mode) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), 18% blue mode (blue round display), 21% green mode (green round display), 16% red mode (red round display) ), And becomes a golden mode (golden round display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the variable display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display which is the determination target at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69 % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting winning (new first hold storage). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 25%, the color becomes red, and at a rate of 35%, the color becomes gold. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning prize is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. Will be.

  As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the rate of the jackpot is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 becomes the golden mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. .

  In addition, as shown in a change pattern of a first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. It may be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than that. Has changed. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the rate at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the rate at which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 to be described later, the rate at which the special mode is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the rate at which the other modes are included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “losing” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “losing”), the corresponding The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 70%, but are displayed at the rate of 30%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 1%. That is, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 40%, but are displayed at the rate of 60%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the rate of big hits is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the rate of the jackpot is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Also, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-hold display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display having a higher degree of expectation than that. It changes to an aspect. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second In some cases, it may be determined to execute a change effect (display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. (2-2) It is determined that the first change effect is to be executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  The effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to the normal mode) and to execute the second change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the The sub-active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 may be determined to be different from the normal mode.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. (4-2) It is determined that the first change effect is not executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  In the process of step S30TM1030, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and ( In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to a new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed in a normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start prize (first hold storage) does not change from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. Does not change from the normal mode to another mode (the change patterns 101 and 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). 301, 401).

  In the case of the above (4-2), the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, but the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1), and (2) -2) and (3), the change pattern of the change effect is determined as described below.

  If it is determined that both the first change effect and the second change effect are to be executed (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, if the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of held storages (the first number of held storages after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5), the updated first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined on the basis of the final display mode (see FIG. 11-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the first change effect is to be executed and the second change effect is not to be executed (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2) If any of them is satisfied, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the last of the determined active display 30TM003 are determined. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In the case of the above (2-2), the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, but the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), the process proceeds to step S30. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first reserved storage number (first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3) above). If this is the case, a prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, when neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is performed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If so, also set the prefetch counter.

  The value (the value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the winning start is set in the look-ahead counter, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Every time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is decremented every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage which is the determination target at the time of the start winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the fluctuation display serving as the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect (or the second change effect is not executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed). (Variation display) is executed.

  If the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period in which the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start winning is generated, it is determined to be YES in the above-described step S30TM1020, so that the new start winning (new first hold storage) is dealt with. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the change display targeted for the first change effect ends.

  FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the first holding storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the n-th first holding display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101. (The timing at the time of the winning prize), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start prize is shifted to a higher position (the active display area 30TM103 side) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) timing when the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing when the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed). ), Display information (suspended display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  In FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, for each change pattern, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is provided at each timing of (i) to (iii). This indicates whether the display mode is set. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed, and “special” indicates a special mode in which a white triangle is displayed. Here, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

  Effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) when the first hold number stored in the first hold number storage area is “1” Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notification target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notification target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, a start winning prize is displayed). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined is displayed).

  Here, the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and when the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, a change pattern 101, a change pattern 102, a change pattern 102, a change result according to a determination result at the time of starting winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. In addition, a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains in the special mode.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Also, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 to be described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode. Further, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the blue mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 to be described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. Also, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the green mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which after the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. Also, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). 412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red mode after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

  Here, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the golden mode. Also, the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 described later). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the golden mode. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the golden mode. In addition, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the color mode is the red mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). 412), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the golden mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “2”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 201, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, a change pattern 201, a change pattern 202, a change pattern 202, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of a start winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 203 and 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at a timing. The change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is changed to the special mode, and the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, and 208, respectively. In the change pattern 205, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice object into a blue form, and the change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the notice object in a special form at the time of starting winning, and then gives a notice at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in the special mode. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 208 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, and 208, respectively.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice object to a red form, and the change pattern 210 is to display the first hold display of the notice object in the blue form at the time of starting winning, and then to give a notice at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the live shift, and the change pattern 212 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reservations shown in FIG. 11-5 (C) when the first reservation storage number stored in the first reservation storage number storage area is “3”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 301, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are changed according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the reference numbers 302. In the change pattern 302, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, and 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the change, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to the blue mode and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the pattern 305, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change result according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, and 305, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to a blue form at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode after the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notification to be notified is also performed at the timing of the second hold shift. A change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the change pattern 308 does not change the first hold display of the notice object in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not performed. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the time of the active shift. The change pattern 309 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. (1) A change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode and does not change the first hold display to be notified even in the active shift timing in the red mode. In the change pattern 310, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four holdings shown in FIG. 11D when the first number of holdings stored in the first number of holdings storage area is “4”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 401, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 402. The change pattern 402 is such that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice object is also displayed at the timing of the active shift. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display is not changed in the special mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403 and 404, respectively. In the change pattern 403, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 is a change pattern in which the hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is such that the first hold display of the preview target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the change of the preview target is performed at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 The hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift three times. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403 and 404, respectively.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, The determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, and 405 to 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 is such that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue state at the timing of the third hold shift without changing the first hold display of the notice object at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the third shift. The first hold display is a change pattern for changing the first hold display to the red mode, and the change pattern 406 is such that the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first notice of the first advance display is made at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to the special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the time of the third hold shift is changed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode while the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notification target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notification target is performed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 408 is the first, second, and third hold after displaying the first hold display of the notification target in a blue mode at the time of the start winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 409 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode after the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object remains in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern that is not changed. The change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form at the time of the start winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice of the notice object at the start winning. After the hold display is displayed in red, the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, and 412, respectively. ing.

  FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. If the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning and if it is determined to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i ) The first to n-th sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the first number n of the stored reservations at that time are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as a sub-display. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, and (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning is positioned higher in the fluctuation order in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (sub-active display area 30TM105). Side) (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) At the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the moving prize shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the starting prize is displayed), the display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize. Information (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 11-6, for each change pattern, at each of the timings (i) to (iii), what kind of display mode is displayed for the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display, and “ “Red” indicates a red mode that is a red star display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 11-6 (A) when the first hold number stored in the first hold number storage area is “1”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Note that in the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105. (The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed.)

  Here, the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and when the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 801, and a change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, and the A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. A change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which a sub-hold display of a notice object is displayed in a normal mode at the time of a start winning, and then the sub-hold display of a notice object is changed to a blue mode at an active shift timing. A change pattern 603 is a start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 603, 604, and 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which a sub-hold display of a notice object is displayed in a blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold display of a notice object is changed to a red mode at an active shift timing. A change pattern 605 is a start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 801 and a change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Also, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Also, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). 912), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “2”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be notified in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 702, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703 and 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display of the notice target into a blue mode, and the change pattern 703 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and thereafter, at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display is changed to a blue mode and the pre-notification sub-hold display is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the sub-hold display of the target for notice is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703, 704, and 705 to 708, respectively. The change pattern 705 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, change the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the first hold shift timing, and change the sub-hold display of the notice object at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display in red to the red mode. The change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the sub-hold to be notified at the first hold shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode and the sub-hold display of the notification target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After the display, at the timing of the first hold shift, the auxiliary hold display to be notified is changed to a red mode, and the active shift The change pattern 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the time of the start, and the change pattern 708 shows the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holdings shown in FIG. 11-6 (C) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “3”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 801, the secondary hold display of the preview target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the preview target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to 802 to change pattern 804, respectively. The change pattern 802 is such that the sub-hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the sub-hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold to be notified at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift is performed. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 803, 804, and 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, change the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the preview object is changed to the red mode and the sub-hold display of the preview object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 806 is the sub-hold display of the preview object at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the preview target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the preview target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. At the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in a blue mode, and then the sub-hold display of the target object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift are displayed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 808 is the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the active shift, the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four holdings shown in FIG. 11-6 (D) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “4”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that is not changed.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the respective patterns 902 to 905. The change pattern 902 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third change is not performed. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to a blue mode, and the auxiliary hold display to be notified is kept in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern that is not changed, and the change pattern 904 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after being displayed in the mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change patterns 901 to 905, and the change patterns 901 to 905 in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination values are assigned to the change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. In the change pattern 906, the secondary hold display of the preview target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the preview target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the secondary hold display of the advance notice is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance notice is red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that is not changed as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notification target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notification target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 908 is the sub-hold display of the notice object at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display of the target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, At the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode in the red mode. The change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After that, at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode, and The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the eye hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 910 is a start winning. Sometimes, the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the blue mode, and the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the blue aspect at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance target is not changed at the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display is changed to a red mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 911 is the target of the notice at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in blue mode, and at the time of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display to be announced is red. This is a change pattern in which the secondary hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the change of the notice target at the time of the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the rate at which the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is executed at a high frequency, thereby enabling the player to respond to the notice effect. You can keep your interest. On the other hand, as for the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 having low visibility, the ratio of the big hit differs depending on whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed at the top of the screen. It will be noted whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the big hit expectation in the case where the second change effect is executed is higher than the first change effect, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. You will also pay attention to

  In the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or secondary active display) displayed at the top of the screen are displayed. Display 30TM005) is different in size and shape. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions in the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. This clarifies the characteristics of each icon so that the player can easily grasp the difference (being different types of display information). In addition, the effects produced by the icons corresponding to the variable display can be diversified to enhance interest.

  Further, as in the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (note that the icons differ in round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. Thereby, the variable display which is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display region 30TM101 and the sub-hold display region 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation degree regarding the target variable display.

  In addition, as in the relationship between the red active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, icons with different shapes for round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). Since the combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-hold sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both hold display modes and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of changing the mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11C, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red display in the red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active displays 30TM005 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both active display modes, and enhances the appeal of the effect of changing the active display mode. be able to.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color changes to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color is changed to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, more active display modes 30TM003 are provided with a higher visibility than the sub-active display modes 30TM005 with lower visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is changed when changing the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. Are provided more than the change patterns. As described above, by changing the type of effect and the effect pattern that can be executed according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second effect can be prevented while preventing the effect from being excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when executing both the first change effect and the second change effect. FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 illustrate both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on image display device 5 at the time of execution.

  First, FIG. 11-8 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the left and right decoration symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 in a fluctuating manner (started at timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-7). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol (first special symbol). In addition, based on the fact that the first storage number is four, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag based on the decision to execute the first change effect as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 as the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 as the target of the second change effect is displayed). ), And the period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7) until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) ends.

  Thereby, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning is generated within the prohibited period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is deleted. Then, the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (5).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 The sub-active display area 30TM105 side by It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and the blue mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are deleted. Display 30TM004b (blue star Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (at timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the sub-hold display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-9 (9).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (10) (at timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (red first display 30TM001c (red circle display)) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star display)) is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. Shift display, and in the image display device 5 To start the display of the change.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect), FIG. During the period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display area 30TM103. Note that a change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. When changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

  When the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period from T7 to T8 in FIG. Vary to the mode. For example, if the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 determined at the time of the start winning is a red mode and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stops in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in an area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 become non-display, so that the visibility of the reach effect is prevented from being reduced and the interest is not reduced. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed in the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display region common to the region in which the reach effect is executed, are not displayed. On the other hand, as for the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen. The player can visually recognize these. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of stored reservations even during the execution period of the reach effect, and also can grasp the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in a case where it is determined that only the first change effect is performed at the time of the start winning is described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. FIG. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image.

  First, FIG. 11-11 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the display pattern of the left middle right decoration pattern is changed on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize, which has been determined, is determined. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. In this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not to be displayed by the determination at the time of the start winning, Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag based on the decision to execute the first change effect, as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the period from when the first hold display 30TM001 targeted for the first change effect is displayed to when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. This is a period (a period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10).

  Thereby, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning is generated within the prohibited period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of storages to be held is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is a target to be notified by the first change effect. Is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-11 (3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-11 (5).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing at T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-11 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts the change display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first reserved display 30TM001c which is a red circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red circle display)) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, and the next change is displayed on the image display device 5. Start display.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display as the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display as the target of the first change effect), FIG. In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display area 30TM103.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) stops in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in an area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 become non-display. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-10).

  As described above, when it is determined that only the first change effect is to be executed at the time of the start winning, a new start winning effect is required until the variable display targeted for the first change effect ends. Is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning is not executed. As described above, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is once changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 having high visibility (after a mode different from the normal mode), a new start winning is generated thereafter. Even in this case, by preventing the second change effect based on the new start winning prize from being executed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect with high visibility, The effect of complicating the effect due to the execution of the second change effect on the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the one change effect is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. The example in which the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Is displayed in a different manner), when a new start winning is generated, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start winning can be executed, but at that time, The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  Further, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), if a new start winning is generated, not only the second change effect but also another notice The execution of the effect may be restricted. For example, each time the variable display is performed, the remaining variable display count until the variable display based on the new start winning prize is performed is displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). Along with the subtraction by one, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0” are displayed). Further, the background change effect of changing the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new starting prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example in which the execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is normally displayed). If a new start prize is generated during the period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize can be executed. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as it may be.

(Modifications related to first change effect and second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift displayed in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the mode is acted on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed in accordance with the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

  FIG. 11-13, FIG. 11-14, and FIG. 11-15 are specific examples of the case where the first holding effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-hold effect is executed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 11-13 (1) illustrates a state in which the first display storage number is 3 and the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. In addition, based on the fact that the first storage number is four, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first pending action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), an effect is performed in which the character A appears and throws the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), in response to execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to a special action. The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side by side. And the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first suspended display of the advance notification target from the special mode to the blue mode based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect during the execution of the variable display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b) which is a blue circular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  Further, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the blue mode based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect from the normal mode (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to the sub reserve display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the sub-holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) in which the character a appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-13 (7), an effect is performed in which a character B appears and throws a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reserved display 30TM001a to be notified, it is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the special mode to blue in response to executing the first hold effect effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue circle display).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-14 (9), an effect is performed in which the character a appears and the balloon flies toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 11-14 (10) and 11-15 (11), the balloon that the character “a” has flown toward the sub reservation display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub reservation display 30TM004. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is changed to a balloon shape (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode in response to the execution of the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) are shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (normal-type sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and blue-type sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star display) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when the variation display is started, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first suspended display to be notified from the blue mode to the red mode based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect during the execution of the variation display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c) which is a red circle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first pending action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

  Further, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red mode based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect during the execution of the variable display (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to the sub reserve display 30TM004c) which is a red star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the sub-holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In the present example, it is assumed that the sub-hold effect effect in which the character b appears (effect effect b) is determined to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (17), an effect is performed in which the character C appears and throws the ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red color in response to executing the first hold effect effect (action effect C). The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-15 (19), an effect is performed in which a character b appears and a balloon is flown toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (20) and 11-15 (21), the balloon that the character b has flew toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. By displaying the displayed image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is changed to a balloon shape (the sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the notification target into a blue mode in response to executing the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b). To the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c which is a red star display). .

  As described above, the first holding action effect executed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub-holding effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub-hold display are different in the effect mode. Thereby, the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of hold corresponding displays (first hold display and sub-hold display) can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, an effect in which a character appears and performs an action on an icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode and the character A appears and performs an active action effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). Also, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect of performing the action of the character “a” appearing and flying a balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 is performed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the active action effect executed when changing the mode of the active display and the sub-active action effect executed when changing the mode of the sub-active display are different in the effect mode. Can be further improved due to the presence of the change corresponding display (active display and sub-active display).

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different depending on the current setting value (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6). Alternatively, the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 themselves are displayed) may be set high. Also, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, three times). The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the change pattern in which the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is changed (for example, two) is high may be set high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. However, as described above, the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift is the final display mode. If it is different, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display will be executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that indicates that there is a possibility of change. The change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode change is performed. When the suggested effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 differs from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of the start winning when performing the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display. In this case, the active change effect and the change suggestion effect are executed during the execution of the variable display, so that the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode when starting the variable display. FIGS. 11 to 16 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the table for determining the change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are respectively assigned to a special mode, a blue mode, a green mode, a red mode, and a gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "o" in Fig. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is performed. ing.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 011, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is three, of which two success modes and one failure mode are included. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A change pattern in which the display is changed to a blue mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change It is a change pattern which changes an active display to a blue mode by performing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. The change pattern 014 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, executes the success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to the special mode, and then executes the success mode change suggestion effect to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a blue mode, and thereafter, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 015 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for a failed mode. The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change patterns 016 and 017 is five, of which four are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed to execute the active indication. Changing the display to a blue mode, and then performing a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to the green mode, and then performing a success mode change suggestion process to change the active display to the red mode, After that, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 017 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, and then displays the change suggestion of the successful mode. To change the active display to a special mode, and then perform a suggestion to change the successful mode, The active display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode. This is a change pattern that changes the active display to the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is five, of which five are successful and zero are failure modes. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. Changing the display to a blue mode, and then performing a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to the green mode, and then performing a success mode change suggestion process to change the active display to the red mode, Thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  If the active display during the active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is two, of which one success mode and one failure mode. The change pattern 021 displays the active display in the special mode during the active shift, executes the change suggestion effect of the successful mode to change the active display to the blue mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to activate. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, of which two success modes and one failure mode. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display pattern is changed to a green mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode. The change pattern 023 is a special mode in which the active display is displayed during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. It is a change pattern which changes an active display to a green form by performing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to the green mode, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed thereafter, and the active display is changed to the red mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a green mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for a failed mode. Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four, of which four are successful and zero are failure modes. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A change in which the display is changed to a green mode, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed thereafter to change the active display to a red mode, and then a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, when the final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 031, after displaying the active display in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a green state.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A display pattern is changed to a red mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed, and the active display is a change pattern in which the active mode is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. This is a change pattern in which a suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is three, of which three are successful and zero are failure modes. In the change pattern 034, the active display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed to change the active display to a golden mode.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 11D. As shown in FIG. 11D, the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode is set so that the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is one, of which the success mode is one and the failure mode is zero. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which after the active display is displayed in the red mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, during one variable display period (in this example, the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established. During the period until the state is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, in particular, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the higher the expected color of the big hit changes the display color. The percentage increases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggestion effect has been executed, the ratio of the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect being executed is higher as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode has been increased. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n = 2), the third change suggestion effect is always executed if both are successful. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case where n = 3 and the case where n = 4. As described above, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the larger the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect executed during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the same fluctuation During the display period (within the period from the start of the variable display to the time when the reach state is established), the rate of execution of the next change suggestion effect is high. Attention is paid to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect, and thereby the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, as the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to the [number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variable display period is higher, the big hit expectation is increased. The rate of change to a display mode with a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In this case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, 4/5, and when the final display mode is the gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. As described above, as the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is larger, the ratio of the change of the active display to the display mode with the higher jackpot expectation is higher. Will also pay attention to the relationship between the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the number of executions of the success suggestion change effect, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed is larger, the rate of change to the display mode having the higher jackpot expectation is higher. Specifically, the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is a blue mode, and is 2 when the final display mode is a green mode. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the golden mode. As a result, the player is interested in whether or not the success suggestion effect change effect is continuously executed and how many times it is continued.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode has the same display color, a change pattern having a larger number of successive success mode change suggestion effects is likely to be selected. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected more frequently than the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (two continuous). 014 (three continuous) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four continuous) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three continuous). As described above, even when the same display color is finally obtained, the effect of suggesting a change in the success mode is easily continuous, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode of the change suggestion effect (success mode or failure mode) based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. As the types of change suggestion effects, change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  In the case of the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change suggestion effect executed in the nth time to the success mode and executes the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. Success mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect execution is performed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect executed for the nth time is a success mode and does not execute the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect. Success mode, no next stage execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the case of the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change suggestion effect executed in the n-th time in a failure mode and executes the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. Failure mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect is performed], character A has 37%, character B has 32%, character C has 30%, character D has 1%, and character E has 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect executed in the nth time is a failure mode and does not execute the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 illustrated in FIG. Failure Mode, Next Stage No Execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the n-th and (n + 1) -th change suggesting effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the n-th change-inducing effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the (n + 1) -th change suggesting effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears in the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears in the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is also a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A similar to the n-th time appears in the third time. According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of being a success mode, but has a high probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. In addition, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of being a success mode of 100%, but the probability of executing the next change suggestion effect is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is low, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is high, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  As described above, since the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the mode of high expectation of big hits differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will do. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player will pay attention to which type of character appears.

  Note that the effect type is not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 11 to 17. For example, an effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode of the active display is low and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is low. An effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode is high and the rate of execution of the next change suggestion effect is high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. In the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18, FIGS. 11-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the golden mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 018. . 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), and (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode when the start winning is achieved. In the case where it is determined that the mode at the time of the active shift is set to the normal mode, and the change pattern of the active display is set to the change pattern 014 when starting the variable display based on the start winning prize. It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears regarding the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the change suggestion effect A of the success mode is to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect is determined, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the change suggestion effect B of the success mode is to be executed based on the fact that the character C appears in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth change suggestion effect is determined. It is determined that the change suggestion effect C of the success mode is executed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. Has been determined to perform the change suggestion effect D, and the change suggestion effect D of the success mode has been determined to be performed based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to execute a change suggestion effect E of a success mode in which the character E appears in the effect.

  In FIG. 11-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol. It shows the state that it is.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change effect A in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), the effect image in which the character A appears from the right side of the screen and the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character A has hit active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (3), in response to completion of the first change suggestion effect, active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) in a special mode is displayed in active display region 30TM103. .

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B in a successful mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character B has hit active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003b (blue circular display) in a blue mode. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect C. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (7), an effect image is displayed in which the character C appears from the right side of the screen and the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b. As shown in FIG. 11-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C has hit the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), in response to the end of the third change suggestion effect, a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect D. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003c in red mode (red circular display). You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect E. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a transparent member (a glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 has a crack is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the range of the crack is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image (screen cracking image 30TM210) of a mode in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in a golden mode. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the screen broken image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol The reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “7”) is stopped is established in the display area, and the text “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). An effect is performed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the gold-colored active display 30TM003e is not displayed, and the rectangular frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also not displayed. The non-displayed information is not displayed until the variable display of the notice object ends.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be a green mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears regarding the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the change suggestion effect A of the success mode is to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect is determined, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the change suggestion effect B of the success mode is to be executed based on the fact that the character C appears in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth change suggestion effect is determined. It is determined that the change suggestion effect C of the success mode is executed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. It changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) illustrated in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-19 (9) are the same as the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above, and will be described. Are omitted, and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D in the failure mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character D did not hit active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the green active display 30TM003d is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. Instead, the character D does not throw and hit. The effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect ends, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the green-state active display 30TM003d. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), a reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area is established, and “reach! Is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach state is established, the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed, so that the green-state active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18 (1) to FIG. 11-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the decorative display of the middle left middle symbol is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. A change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. When the execution of the change suggestion effect for a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish the reach state. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. It is not established. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times in accordance with the change pattern, the manner in which the decorative symbol is fluctuated is not changed.

  In addition, FIG. 11-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. . Further, a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more frequently than the change suggestion effect of the successful mode may be provided. For example, a change pattern in which a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed twice consecutively after a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed three consecutive times may be provided. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed one or more times, but the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed. The example in which the display mode is changed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes.For example, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when the suggested effect is executed may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by one step (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode). Blue mode, blue mode to green mode, green mode to red mode, red mode to gold mode), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed. May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by two or more levels (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a gold mode). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps may be different depending on the type of the change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the appearing character). For example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears Is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Furthermore, when a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three steps.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Specifically, when the decorative symbol is displayed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo-running variation in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-varied is performed one or more times, before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, A change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when the temporary stop is performed n times, a change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n successive change suggestion effects of the success mode are executed), and thereafter, By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be indicated that the (n + 1) th temporary stop is not executed. In addition, in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo-run variation is not executed at all, an effect pattern in which only the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed. May be provided. In addition, in the case where the decorative symbol change display is executed based on a change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change is executed a predetermined upper limit number (for example, n + 1 times), n + 1 times success mode change suggestion effects are continuously performed. An effect pattern may be provided that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

  In the case of such a configuration, a change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decoration symbol is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is terminated before the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, the character A appears and performs an action immediately after the fancy display of the decorative pattern is started, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Is started, the character B appears and performs an action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode. After that, the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-change is performed. After the start, the character C may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. As described above, by making the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period of changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) not to overlap, it is possible to pay attention to the change suggestion effect. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped from being reduced.

  When performing an effect of changing the display direction of the decorative design from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, a change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (a character appears). It is preferable that the change suggestion effect is ended before the change display direction of the decorative symbol is changed to the horizontal direction (the character performs an action and the display mode of the active display changes). For example, the first character appears and performs an action immediately after the decorative pattern change display is started, and the display form of the active display changes from the normal form to the blue form, and thereafter, the change display direction of the decorative pattern changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this manner, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decoration symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed and the decoration symbol change display can be performed. The effect of the effect when the direction changes can be prevented from being reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the change suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the display mode of the active display is changed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. May be an effect that suggests that is changing. For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the success suggestion change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. Alternatively, when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (the effect acting on the active display or the hold display. The action of throwing a character is shown), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display, In the effect of suggesting a change in the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In addition, the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the success suggestion change suggestion effect and the failure change suggestion effect. For example, in the success suggestion change effect, the active display or the hold display to be changed is changed. Perform the action of throwing the ball in the direction of (i.e., an effect that affects the active display or the hold display), and in the effect suggesting a change in the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or the hold display (the active display or the hold display). It is also possible to perform an effect that does not work).

  In the above-described embodiment, the more the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the greater the number of executions of the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period. Is higher, the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed during the predetermined period is, the higher the big hit expectation degree is. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo consecutive symbol in which the re-variation (pseudo-run) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily performed. The period may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol again after the decoration symbol is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-runs). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols in the middle left and right. It may be a period until the final stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are executed, a plurality of patterns may be provided for a period from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, if the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the success rate of the next change suggestion effect is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree May be higher. In addition, when the change suggestion effect is executed a large number of times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the big hit expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of 1 is finished, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is to be executed and also determines the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You will be interested and improve your interests.

  In the above embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the active display is changed may be changed according to the current setting values (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the display ratio of the active display is higher in a mode different from the normal mode when the set value is high (4 to 6) as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do it. Also, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, three times or more) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The ratio at which the pattern is selected is high, that is, the ratio at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the ratio at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which the character X having a low appearance frequency appears) is higher when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is lower (1 to 3). May be increased.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Display control means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
A change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means can execute a change suggestion effect of a success mode and a change suggestion effect of a failure mode as a change suggestion effect,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a ratio controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player differs according to the number of executions of a change suggestion effect of a success mode with respect to the number of executions of a change suggestion effect in a predetermined period.

Images